Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG ManualsMobile PhonesC660

USER GUIDE

LG-C660

www.lg.com

E N G L I S H

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

P/N : MFL67300830 (1.1)

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

LG-C660

www.lg.com

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

E N G L I S H

P/N : MFL67300830 (1.1)

Summary of content (238 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH ENGLISH ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ LG-C660 www.lg.com P/N : MFL67300830 (1.1) USER GUIDE LG-C660 P/N : MFL67300830 (1.1) www.lg.
PAGE 2
Bluetooth QD ID B017971
PAGE 3
‫‪ LG-C660‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪.www.lg.com‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻔﻮﻓﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪Copyright © LG Electronics, Inc.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ LG .‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ LG Group‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪6 .......‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪35 ......................‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ‪36 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪36 .....................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪22 ..............‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪37 ........... Google‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ‪13 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪25 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪27 ..‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪28 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪29 ..............
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪42 .........‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪52 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪42 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪42 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ‪43 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ‪43 ........‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪43 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪43 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪43 .... Microsoft Exchange‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫)‪44 ............. (POP3، IMAP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ‪45 ...
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪58 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ‪58 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪59 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪59 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪59 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪60 .............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪61 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ ‪61 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪61 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪61 ..........‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ‪62‬‬ ‫‪62 ............. Polaris Viewer‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪63 ...
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪71 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪71 ...........‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪71 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪73 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪74 ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪75 .....
PAGE 8
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴّﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ّﺪﺩ‬ ‫)‪ .(SAR‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ LG-C660‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ RF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ّﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،10%‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﺤﻦ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ <‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪ .Market‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 19
‫‪3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪microSD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪SMS‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ • ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪ • 4‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ • 5‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪ Suite IV‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ LGInstaller.exe‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪ ،Suite IV‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺇﻋﻼﻣًﺎ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺈﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ "USB‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺇﻋﻼﻣًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 24
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ!‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ < USB‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ < USB‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪Android Platform Driver‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ CSV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،PC Suite IV‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.PC Suite IV‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ‪PC Suite‬‬ ‫‪ IV‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،(USB‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ "ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ!‬ ‫* ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪) FTP‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ FTP‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫"ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ"؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ FTP‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪.FTP‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ "ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪120‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪:‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺈﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ِ 2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-C660‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻯ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-C660‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪32‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ ،LG-C660‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ – ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ – ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ "ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰﺍً ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﻞ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ )‪(3G‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪QWERTY‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ – shift/‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫"ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ" ﻭﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﺺ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Google‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Gmail‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ < ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 40
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪،Gmail‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ!ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "+‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻨﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘُﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-C660‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ‪ MMS‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻟﻺﻧﺸﺎء" ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪ SMS‬ﻭ‪ (MMS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ – SSL‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ SSL‬ﻟـ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.Microsoft Exchange‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ" ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺍﺳﻢ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ "ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء" ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Exchange‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﺎً ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Exchange‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ؛‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪ Exchange‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ > ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،TLS‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ SSL‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ – SMTP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ – SMTP‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ TLS‬ﻭ‪ SSL‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ّﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "‪ "-‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "‪ "+‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺣ ّﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3M ( 2048x1536)،‬‬ ‫‪2M (1600x1200)، 1M‬‬ ‫‪(1280x960)، VGA‬‬ ‫‪(640x480), QVGA‬‬ ‫‪.((320x240‬‬ ‫‪ – ISO‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪ ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 53
‫– ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ّﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "‪ "-‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "‪ "+‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ًﺓ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ًﺓ ً‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﻭﻣﺸﻤﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ – ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫– ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ Picasa‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪/Bluetooth‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Gmail‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.YouTube‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ Gmail‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪LG Android Platform‬‬ ‫‪ ،Driver‬ﻓﺴﺘﺮﻯ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺎً ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ 'ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-C660‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺛﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒّﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻴّﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪/Bluetooth‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ Gmail ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎً ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ -‬ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺃﻳﺎً ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ – ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫< ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ .Bluetooth‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ – ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ – ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛـ ﺑﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪– SIM/RUIM‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ – ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪،Android‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .USB‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪،SD‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(AP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ <‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ <‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG-C660‬ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ WEP‬ﻭ‪WPA/WPA2‬‬ ‫‪ PSK‬ﻭ‪ .802.1x EAP‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ http://update.lgmobile.com‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪http://www.lg.com/common‬‬ ‫‪ ← /index.jsp‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺗﺎﺣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺤﻪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫® ‪ DivX Certified‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫®‪ DivX‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.240 x 320‬‬ ‫®‪ DivX‬ﻭ®‪DivX Certified‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Rovi‬‬ ‫‪ Corporation‬ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ! ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Open Source‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ‪ LGPL‬ﻭ‪MPL‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪http://opensource.lge.com/‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.LG-C660‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪.LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ (‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ‬+45 ،(‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬+55 :‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬10- :‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ Declaration of Conformity Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Electronics Inc.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ /‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 80
PAGE 81
‫‪ LG-C660‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ‪© LG Electronics, Inc.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ LG‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ LG Group‬ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‪6 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪13 ........................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ! ‪22 ............‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪25 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪27 .......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪28 ...............‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪29 ..............‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪30 ......‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪31 ..................‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪31 ......‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪31 ..........
PAGE 83
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪42 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪52 ................‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪42 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ‪42 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍی ‪43 .............‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ‪43 ....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪43 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪43 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪43 .................... Exchange‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫)‪44 ............ (POP3، IMAP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ‪45 .............
PAGE 84
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪58 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪59 .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪59 ..................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪59 .............‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪60 ................‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪60 ..............‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪61 ............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪61 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪61 .........‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪61 .....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪62 ....‬‬ ‫‪62 ............. Polaris Viewer‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ‪63 .............
PAGE 85
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪71 ............‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪71 ....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪71 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪73 .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‪74 ........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ‪75 ...........................
PAGE 86
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬ ‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )‪ .(SAR‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ LG-C660‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 87
‫• ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﮐﻨﻴﻦ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ SAR‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﻨﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ‬ ‫)‪ (IEEE‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪1.6 ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ‪ 1‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی‪،‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫• ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺸﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪ Electronics‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻀﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻀﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ< ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ< ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ( ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺻﺪی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ( ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪Android‬‬ ‫‪ Market‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ <‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 99
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ • 4‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ • 5‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ LG PC Suite IV‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪LGInstaller.exe‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻼﻧﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 101
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .14‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ!‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪ < ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ < USB‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪LG Android Platform Driver‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ < ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ < ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪CSV‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ CSV‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪LG PC Suite IV‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪) OK‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪PC Suite IV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ!‬ ‫* ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ < ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی <‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی‬‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪micro USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LG-C660‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-C660‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 32‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ!‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ‪/‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ – ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭﻳﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻮی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻮی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪GPS 3G‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ – ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ • ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ؛ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺪﺩی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪ Google‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ‪ Gmail‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ ،Gmail‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺪی <‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪ Google‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪،Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ "‪"+‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ LG-C660‬ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ MMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ )‪ (SMS، MMS‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ – ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ – SSL‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ SSL‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ "ﻧﺎﻡ" ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Exchange‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪ Exchange‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺁﺩﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪Exchange‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؛ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ Exchange‬ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪/‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ <‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی – ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ – ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ – ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ TLS ،SSL‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ – ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ – ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ "‪ "-‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ "‪ "+‬ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ – ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪VGA (640 x 480)،‬‬ ‫)‪.QVGA (320 x 240‬‬ ‫‪ – ISO‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Auto، 400، 200‬ﻭ ‪100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی – ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺌﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ISO ،‬ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫"‪ "-‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ "‪ "+‬ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ – ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ – ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ )ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی – ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 135
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 137
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‪ Gmail ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪ SNS‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫‪ SNS‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻨﻮ < ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ < ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻭﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ "ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ؟" ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 141
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ LG-C660 ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 143
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ‪ Microsoft Office‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Adobe PDF‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Polaris‬‬ ‫‪ ،Viewer‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰی‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ – ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ – ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻣﺰﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﮐﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 149
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ )‪ (AP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ < ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 150
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ LG-C660‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫< ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ <‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-C660‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ WEP، WPA/WPA2-PSK‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 802.1x EAP‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ http://update.lgmobile.com‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪http://www.lg.com/common‬‬ ‫‪ ← index.jsp/‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮی ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ‪vod.divx.com‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ®DivX Certified‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ®DivX‬ﺗﺎ ‪320x240‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪DivX®، DivX‬‬ ‫‪ ®Certified‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪Rovi‬‬ ‫‪ Corporation‬ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ LG-C660‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪LG-C660‬‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ (‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺷﺎﺭژ‬+45 (‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺩﺷﺎﺭژ‬+55 :‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬-10 :‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ Declaration of Conformity Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment Model Name LG-C660 Trade Name LG Applicable Standards Details R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01 V1.
PAGE 155
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 158
PAGE 159
LG-C660 User Guide This guide helps you get started using your phone. If you need more information, please visit www.lg.com. • Some of the contents present in this manual may not apply to your phone and it depends on your phone’s software or your service provider. • This handset is not recommended for the visually impaired because of its touch-screen keypad. • Copyright © LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities.
PAGE 160
Contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use ..........................................6 Important notice ...................13 Before using the mobile phone, ﬁrst read! ..............................22 Getting to know your phone .25 Installing the SIM card and battery ................................27 Installing the memory card ...29 Formatting the memory card ...........................................30 Your home screen .................31 Touch-screen tips ................31 Lock your phone ..........
PAGE 161
Messaging/email ..................42 Messaging...........................42 Sending a message..............42 Threaded box ......................43 Using emoticons ..................43 Changing your message settings ...............................43 Setting up your email ...........43 Microsoft Exchange email account ...............................43 Other (POP3, IMAP) email account ...............................44 Composing and sending email ...........................................
PAGE 162
Contents Timeline view .......................56 My Images options menu......56 Sending a photo...................56 Sending a video ...................57 Using an image ....................57 Creating a slideshow ............57 Checking your photo ............57 Transferring ﬁles using USB mass storage devices ...........57 Music ..................................58 Playing a song .....................58 Using the radio ....................59 Searching for stations ..........59 Resetting channels .........
PAGE 163
Accessibility.........................68 Date & Time.........................68 About Phone ........................68 Wi-Fi .....................................69 Turning on Wi-Fi...................69 Connecting to Wi-Fi ..............69 USB tethering ......................69 Wi-Fi tethering .....................70 Software update ...................71 Phone Software update ........71 ....71 DivX Mobile Accessories ..........................73 Technical data.......................74 Troubleshooting ......
PAGE 164
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. • Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information. This mobile phone model LG-C660 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 165
which is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1g of tissue. Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.
PAGE 166
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner or alcohol). • Do not charge the phone when it is on soft furnishings. • The phone should be charged in a well ventilated area. • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone.
PAGE 167
Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the area when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment.
PAGE 168
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use not touch or attempt to remove. Stop using your mobile device until the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider. Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Potentially explosive atmospheres • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
PAGE 169
Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the battery life. • Do not disassemble or shortcircuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance.
PAGE 170
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the phone is fully charged to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger. • Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions.
PAGE 171
Important notice Please check to see whether any problems you encountered with your phone are described in this section before taking the phone in for service or calling a service representative. 3 Tap Uninstall, then touch OK to uninstall the application you selected. 2. Optimising battery life Extend your battery's life between charges by turning 1. Phone memory off features you don't need to run constantly in the When available space in your phone memory is less than 10%, background.
PAGE 172
Important notice • Some applications you downloaded may cause your battery’s life to be reduced. Checking the battery charge level 1 On the home screen, touch the Applications tab, then select Settings > About phone > Status. 2 The battery status (Charging, Not charging) and level (percentage of fully charged) are displayed at the top of the screen. Monitoring and controlling what uses the battery 1 On the home screen, touch the Applications tab, then select Settings > About phone > Battery Use.
PAGE 173
WARNING: To protect your phone and personal data, only download applications from trusted sources, such as Android Market. If there are improperly installed applications on your phone, your phone may not work normally or a serious error may occur. You must uninstall those applications and all their data and settings from the phone. 4. Using unlock pattern Set unlock pattern to secure your phone. This opens a set of screens that guide you through how to draw a screen unlock pattern.
PAGE 174
Important notice the phone or you forgot it, you have to perform a Hard reset. 2 If you forgot your PIN or Password, you need to do Hard Reset. Caution: If you perform a hard reset, all user applications and user data are deleted. Remember to back up any important data before performing a hard reset. Caution: If you perform a Hard reset, all user applications and user data are deleted. This cannot be reversed. Remember to back up any important data before performing a hard reset. 6.
PAGE 175
2 Touch Wi-Fi to turn it on and begin scanning for available Wi-Fi networks. • A list of available Wi-Fi networks is displayed. Secured networks are indicated by a lock icon. 3 Touch a network to connect to it. • If the network is open, you are asked to confirm that you want to connect to that network by touching Connect. • If the network is secure, you're asked to enter a password or other credentials. (Ask your network administrator for details.) 4 The status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi status.
PAGE 176
Important notice before opening another. Use and switch between several open applications. Android manages each application, stopping and starting them as needed to ensure that idle applications don’t consume resources unnecessarily. Stopping applications 1 On the home screen, touch the Applications tab, then select Settings > Applications > Manage applications. 2 Scroll to the desired application and touch Force Stop to stop it. TIP Returning to recent apps Press and hold the Home key.
PAGE 177
Installing LG PC Suite from your microSD memory card 1 Insert your microSD memory card into your phone. (It may already be inserted.) 2 Before connecting the USB data cable, make sure that Mass storage only mode is enabled on your phone. (In the applications menu, choose Settings, Storage then select the Mass Storage Only box.) 3 Use the USB data cable to connect your phone to the PC. 4 • In the status bar, drag the USB icon. • Choose USB Connected and Turn On USB Storage.
PAGE 178
Important notice LG-C660 does not support: - LG Air Sync (Web Sync, R-Click) - OSP (On Screen Phone) - To-do in Calendar - Memo - Java application After installing PC Suite IV, you can find its user guide in the Help menu. 1 Use the USB cable to connect your phone to a USB port on your computer. Once connected, you receive notification that a USB connection has been made. 2 Open the Notification drawer and touch USB Connected.
PAGE 179
To disconnect your phone from the computer, carefully follow your computer’s instructions for properly disconnecting USB devices to avoid losing information on the card. 1 Safely disconnect the USB device from your computer. 2 Open the Notification drawer and touch Turn Off USB Storage. 3 Touch Turn Off in the dialog that opens. 13. When the screen freezes 12. Hold your phone straight up Make sure to disconnect the data cable between your phone and PC; leaving it connected might cause errors on your PC.
PAGE 180
Before using the mobile phone, ﬁrst read! How to save music/video files to your phone Connect your phone to the PC using the USB cable. On the home screen, touch and drag the status bar down. Select USB Connected > Turn On USB Storage > Open Folder To View Files. If you didn't install LG Android Platform Driver onto your PC, you must set it manually. For more information, refer to Transferring Files Using USB Mass Storage Devices. Save music or video files from the PC to the phone's removable storage.
PAGE 181
3 If the fields in the imported CSV file are different from those in PC Suite IV, you need to map the fields. After mapping the fields, click OK. The contacts are then added to PC Suite IV. 4 If PC Suite IV detects the connection of your LG-C660 phone (using the USB cable), click Sync or Sync Contacts to synchronise the contacts saved to your PC with your phone.
PAGE 182
Before using the mobile phone, ﬁrst read! * Connecting to FTP (only the FTP server is supported on this handset): Select Settings > Wireless & Networks > Bluetooth Settings. Select the Discoverable box; now, you can search for your phone from other devices. Find the FTP service and connect to the FTP server. • If you want to search for this phone from other devices, go to Settings > Wireless & Networks > Bluetooth settings. Select the Discoverable box. The box is cleared after 120 seconds.
PAGE 183
Getting to know your phone To turn on your phone, press and hold the Power key for 3 seconds. To turn off the phone, press the Power key for 3 seconds, then touch Power Off. Earpiece Home key - Returns to home screen from any screen. Menu key - Check what options are available. Power/Lock key - Turns your phone on/off when you press and hold the key. - Turns off the screen and locks. Back key - Returns to the previous screen. Search key - Search the Web and contents in your phone.
PAGE 184
Getting to know your phone Stereo earphone connector Volume keys - On the home screen: Controls ringer volume. - During a call: Controls your earpiece volume. - When playing a track: Controls volume continuously. Power/Lock key - Turns your phone on/off when you press and hold the key. - Turns the screen off and locks the phone.
PAGE 185
Installing the SIM card and battery 1 To remove the back cover, hold the phone in your hand firmly. With the other hand, firmly press your thumb on the back cover. Now lift off the battery cover. 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards.
PAGE 186
Getting to know your phone 3 Insert the battery into place by aligning the gold contacts on the phone and the battery. Charging your phone Insert the charger in the charger connector on the side of the phone, then plug it into an electrical outlet. Your LG-C660 must be charged before you see . 4 Replace the back cover of the phone. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. NOTE: The LG-C660 has an internal antenna.
PAGE 187
Installing the memory card To store multimedia files, such as images captured using the built-in camera, you must insert a memory card into your phone. To insert a memory card: NOTE: The LG-C660 supports memory cards up to 32 GB. 1 Turn the phone off before inserting or removing a memory card. Remove the back cover. 2 Insert the memory card into the slot. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards.
PAGE 188
Getting to know your phone Formatting the memory card 3 Close the back cover. WARNING! Do not insert or remove the memory card when the phone is on. Doing so may damage the memory card as well as your phone, and the data stored on the memory card may be corrupted. 30 Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you must format it before you can use it. NOTE: All files on the card are deleted when you format the card.
PAGE 189
Your home screen Touch-screen tips Lock your phone Here are some tips on how to navigate around your phone. Touch – To choose a menu/ option or open an application, touch it. Touch and hold – To open an options menu or grab an object you want to move, touch and hold it. Drag – To scroll through a list or move slowly, drag across the touch screen. Flick – To scroll through a list or move quickly, flick across the touch screen (drag quickly and release).
PAGE 190
Your home screen Caution: When you set an unlock pattern, you need to create your Gmail account first. Caution: Precautions to take when using the Pattern Lock. It is very important that you remember the unlock pattern you set. You have 5 opportunities to enter your unlock Pattern, PIN or Password. If you have used all 5 opportunities, you may attempt again after 30 seconds. Unlock screen Whenever your LG-C660 is not in use, it returns to the lock screen.
PAGE 191
Touch the Message icon to access the messaging menu. This is where you can create a new message. Touch the Applications tab at the bottom of the screen. You can then view all your installed applications. Adding widgets to your home screen You can customise your home screen by adding shortcuts, widgets or folders to it. For more convenience using your phone, add your favourite widgets to the home screen. 1 On the home screen, touch the Menu key and select Add.
PAGE 192
Your home screen 2 Touch an icon to open its application. Or, touch the Back key to return to the current application. Notification drawer The notification drawer runs across the top of your screen. Ring Wi-Fi Bluetooth GPS Viewing the status bar The status bar uses different icons to display phone information, such as signal strength, new messages, battery life and active Bluetooth and data connections. Below is a table explaining the meaning of icons you’re likely to see in the status bar.
PAGE 193
Icon Description Icon Description Missed call Upload Bluetooth on GPS is acquiring Bluetooth connected GPS is on System warning Alarm New voicemail Airplane mode Silent Vibrate No SD card Battery fully charged Battery is charging Data in Data out Data in and out Entering text Qwerty keyboard Shift key – Press once to capitalise the next letter you type. Double-press for All Caps. Number and Symbols key – Press to change between number and symbol input.
PAGE 194
Your home screen Virtual keyboard Use the virtual keyboard by holding your phone horizontally. To display the keyboard, touch a text field. Tap to change between Number and Symbol modes. Tap to toggle between lowercase and uppercase. To input one capital letter, tap once. If you tap this key twice, uppercase is locked. Touch to change the writing language. Touch and hold to select multiple writing language. Use to enter a space. Use to delete text.
PAGE 195
Google account setup The first time you open the Google application on your phone, you are required to sign in with your existing Google account. If you do not have a Google account, you are asked to create one. Creating your Google account 1 On the home screen, touch the Applications tab to open the Applications menu. 2 Tap Gmail, then tap Next > Create to start the Gmail setup wizard. 3 Enter your name and username for your Google account. 4 Tap Next.
PAGE 196
Google account setup IMPORTANT • Some applications, such as Calendar, work only with the first Google Account you add. If you plan to use more than one Google Account on your phone, be sure to sign in to the one you want to use with such applications first. When you sign in, your contacts, Gmail messages, Calendar events and other information from these applications and services on the Web are synchronised with your phone.
PAGE 197
Calls Making a call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Enter the number using the keypad. To delete a digit, touch the Clear icon . 3 Touch the Call icon to make a call. 4 To end a call, touch and drag left the End icon . TIP! To enter “+” to make international calls, touch and hold . Calling your contacts 1 Touch to open your contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list or enter the first letter(s) of the contact you want to call by touching Search. 3 In the list, touch the contact you want to call.
PAGE 198
Calls 4 Both calls are displayed on the call screen. Your initial call is locked and put on hold. 5 Touch to toggle between calls. Or touch to make a conference call. 6 To end active calls, touch End Call. If there is no active call, it ends the Hold Call. To end all calls at the same time, press the Menu key and select End All Calls. NOTE: You are charged for each call you make. Viewing your call logs On the home screen, touch and choose the Call Log tab.
PAGE 199
Contacts Add contacts to your phone and synchronise them with the contacts in your Google account or other accounts that support contact syncing. Searching for a contact On the home screen 1 Touch to open your contacts. 2 Touch Search and enter the contact name using the keypad. Adding a new contact 1 Touch , enter the new contact’s number, then press the Menu key. Now, touch Add To Contacts and then Create New Contact. 2 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, touch .
PAGE 200
Messaging/email Messaging Your LG-C660 combines SMS and MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. Sending a message 1 Touch the icon, then touch New Message. 2 Enter a contact name or number into the To field. As you enter the contact name, matching contacts appear. Touch a suggested recipient. You can add multiple contacts. NOTE: You are charged for one text message for every person you send the message to. 3 Touch Type To Compose below to start entering your message.
PAGE 201
Threaded box Setting up your email Messages (SMS, MMS) exchanged with another party can be displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see an overview of your conversation. Touch the Applications tab and select Email. If the email account is not set up, you need to start the email setup wizard. Using emoticons When writing a new message, press the Menu key, then choose Insert Smiley.
PAGE 202
Messaging/email Use SSL – Choose whether to use SSL for Microsoft Exchange. Sync Contacts – Choose whether to synchronize Contacts of the Microsoft Exchange account. Sync Calendar – Choose whether to synchronize Calendar of the Microsoft Exchange account. Touch the Next button to connect to the server. The Setup Complete screen appears and you need to enter “name” for account display and your name. Now the account appears in the list of accounts.
PAGE 203
5 Touch Attach to attach a file you want to send with your message. 6 Touch Send. If you’re not ready to send Composing and sending the message, touch the Menu email key and then Save As Draft to save it to a Drafts folder. To compose and send an email Touch the draft message in 1 While in the Email application, the Drafts folder to resume touch the Menu key and then working on it. Your message Compose. is also saved as a draft if 2 Enter an address for the you touch the Back key message’s recipient.
PAGE 204
Messaging/email Please note that messages sent using an Exchange account are not located on the phone; they are located on the Exchange server itself. If you want to see your sent messages in the Sent folder (or with the Sent label), you often need to open the Sent folder/ label and select Refresh from the Options menu. TIP! When a new email arrives in the Inbox, you receive notification by sound or vibration. Tap the email notification to stop notification.
PAGE 205
To change account settings: Open Email, Select Menu key > Settings. To change individual account settings select the account you want to edit. Incoming Server – Enter the incoming email server address. Port Number – Displays incoming server port number. Secure Type – Choose from TLS, SSL and Off. Outgoing Server – Enter the outgoing email server address. Port Number – Displays outgoing server port number. SMTP Secure Type – Choose from TLS, SSL and Off.
PAGE 206
Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Brightness – This defines and controls the amount of light entering the image. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar towards “-” for less brightness, or towards “+” for more brightness. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out. Alternatively, you can use the side volume keys. Settings – Touch this icon to open the Settings menu. See Using The Advanced Settings. Video mode – Slide this icon down to switch to Video mode.
PAGE 207
TIP! Close all shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen. Touch the centre of the viewfinder once. To display the options, touch the screen again. Taking a quick photo 1 Open the Camera application. 2 Holding the phone horizontally, and point the lens towards the subject you want to photograph. 3 Tap in the center of the screen; a focus box then appears in the centre of the viewfinder screen. 4 Position the phone so you can see the subject in the focus box. 5 Press the Capture button.
PAGE 208
Camera Using the advanced settings In the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced options. Change camera settings by scrolling the list. After selecting the option, touch the Back key. Image size – Touch to set the size (in pixels) of the picture you take. Select a pixel value from the numerical options: 3M (2048 x 1536), 2M (1600 x 1200), 1M (1280 x 960), VGA (640 x 480), QVGA (320 x 240). ISO – The ISO rating determines the sensitivity of the camera’s light sensor.
PAGE 209
NOTE: This function is only available when GPS is active. Reset – Restore all camera default settings. – Touch whenever you want to know how this function operates. This provides you with a quick guide. TIP! When you exit the camera, all settings return to their defaults, except image size,image quality,ISO and Shutter sound. Any nondefault settings must be reset, such as colour tone. Check these before you take your next photo.
PAGE 210
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Brightness – This defines and controls the amount of light entering the video. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar towards “-” for less brightness, or towards “+” for more brightness. Zoom – Zoom in or out. Alternatively, you can use the side volume keys. Before shooting a video, you can use the zoom function. You cannot control the zoom function while shooting. Settings – Touch this icon to open the Settings menu. See Using The Advanced Settings.
PAGE 211
Shooting a quick video 1 Slide the Camera mode button down and the icon changes to . 2 The video camera’s viewfinder appears on the screen. 3 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to in your video. 4 Press the Capture button once to start recording. 5 REC turns to red at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video. 6 Touch on the screen to stop recording. After shooting a video A still image representing your video appears on the screen.
PAGE 212
Video camera White Balance – White balance ensures that the white areas in your video are realistic. To enable your camera to adjust the white balance correctly, you may need to determine the light conditions. Choose from Auto, Incandescent, Sunny, Fluorescent and Cloudy. Colour effect – Choose a colour tone to use for your new view. Video Quality – Choose from Super Fine, Fine and Normal. Audio Recording – Choose Mute to record a video without sound.
PAGE 213
Your photos and videos Adjusting the volume when viewing a video To adjust the volume of a video while it is playing, use the volume keys on the left side of the phone. Setting a photo as wallpaper 1 Touch the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it. 2 Touch the screen to open the Options menu. 3 Touch menu , then touch more, then touch , Set As then touch wallpaper. 4 Adjust the size of the wallpaper you want to set, then touch save.
PAGE 214
Multimedia You can store multimedia files to a memory card to have easy access to all your image and video files. Touch the Applications tab, then select Gallery. Open a list of catalogue bars that store all your multimedia files. NOTE: Make sure you install a memory card into the phone to save photos and access all your pictures. Without a memory card, the phone does not display photos or videos without Picasa images, which are in your Picasa album. View model Touch Gallery and Folder view is displayed.
PAGE 215
TIP! If you have an SNS account and set it up on your phone, you can share your photo with the SNS community. Sending a video 1 To send a video, touch and hold the video you want. 2 Select Share. Choose from Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging or YouTube. 3 When you choose Email, Gmail or Messaging, your video is attached to a message; you then write and send the message normally. Using an image Choose images to use as wallpaper or to identify callers. 1 Touch and hold, then select Set As from More menu.
PAGE 216
Multimedia 3 Touch Turn on USB Storage. 4 You can view the mass storage contents on your PC and transfer the files. NOTE: You need to install a SD card first. Without a SD card, you cannot use USB mass storage. NOTE: If you installed LG Android Platform Driver, you immediately see a pop-up with Turn On USB Storage. Music Your LG-C660 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks. To access the music player, touch Music.
PAGE 217
check the national laws of the relevant country concerning the use of such material. Using the radio Your LG-C660 has a built-in FM radio so you can tune in to your favourite stations and listen on the go. NOTE: You must attach your headphones to listen to the radio. Insert them into the headphone jack. Searching for stations You can tune in to radio stations by searching for them manually or automatically. They are then saved to specific channel numbers, so you don't have to find them again.
PAGE 218
Multimedia Listening to the radio 1 Touch the speaker Icon which is at the left top in the radio screen to listen to radio via speaker. TIP! To improve radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio antenna. WARNING: If you connect a headset not specifically made for radio reception, radio reception may be poor.
PAGE 219
Utilities Setting your alarm 1 On the home screen, touch the Applications tab and select Clock. 2 If you want to add a new alarm, touch . then touch add alarm. 3 Input the desired time, then touch set. Touch to turn on/off the alarm. After you set the time, the LG-C660 lets you know how much time is left before the alarm sounds. 4 Set Repeat, Ringtone or Vibrate, then add a label to name the alarm. Touch Done. 5 Press the Menu key to add an alarm, or adjust the snooze duration or alarm volume from Settings.
PAGE 220
Utilities 6 If you want to add a note to your event, touch Description and enter the details. 7 If you want to repeat the alarm, set Repetition, and set Reminders, if necessary. 8 Touch Done to save the event to the calendar. A coloured square in the calendar marks all days that have saved events. An alarm sounds at the event start time to help you stay organised. Changing your calendar view 1 On the home screen, touch the Applications tab and select Calendar.
PAGE 221
Voice recorder Sending the voice Use the voice recorder to record recording voice memos or other audio files. 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the Recording a sound or voice audio clip by touching the 1 On the home screen, touch Menu key and Share. the Applications tab and 2 Choose from Bluetooth, select Voice Recorder. Email, Gmail and Messaging. 2 Touch to begin When you select Email, Gmail recording. and Messaging, the voice recording is added to the 3 Touch to end recording.
PAGE 222
The Web Browser Browser gives you a fast, fullcolour world of games, music, news, sports, entertainment and much more, right on your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you enjoy. NOTE: Additional charges apply when connecting to these services and downloading content. Check data charges with your network provider. Using options Press the Menu key to view options. New Window – Open a new window. Bookmark – Add/Show Bookmark and show Most Visited Site and History.
PAGE 223
TIP! To return to the previous Web page, press the Back key. Adding and accessing bookmarks 1 Press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks. 2 Touch the first item, Add, then enter a name for the bookmark followed by its URL 3 To access the bookmark, simply touch it. You are then connected to the bookmarked page. Changing Web browser settings Press the Menu key, then select More > Settings.
PAGE 224
Settings Wireless & Networks Here, you can manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. You can share your phone’s mobile data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot, set up Virtual Private Network. Also, you can set mobile networks and Airplane mode. Airplane mode – After setting Airplane mode, all wireless connections are disabled. Call settings Change call settings, Call forwarding, call barring, call waiting, voicemail, FDN, etc. Sound Adjust sound, notification default settings and vibrate mode.
PAGE 225
set PIN or Password instead of Pattern or leave it as None. When you turn on your phone or wake up the screen, you're asked to draw your unlock pattern to unlock the screen. Set up SIM/RUIM card lock – Set up SIM card lock or change the SIM PIN. Visible Passwords – Select to show passwords as you type them or deselect to hide passwords as you type them. Select Device Administrators – Add one or more administrators. Use Secure Credentials – Allows you to access secure certificates.
PAGE 226
Settings Privacy Voice Input & Output You can reset the phone to factory data settings. Be careful, as this deletes all your data. Use the Text-to-Speech settings to configure the Android textto-speech synthesiser for applications use it. Storage Change USB connection mode. Check Total / available SD card space. Touch Unmount SD Card for safe removal. Erase SD Card if you want to delete all data from the SD card. Accessibility Search Date & Time Touch Google Search to adjust Google search settings.
PAGE 227
Wi-Fi With Wi-Fi, you can use highspeed Internet access within the coverage of the wireless access point (AP). Enjoy wireless Internet using Wi-Fi, without extra charges. Turning on Wi-Fi From the home screen, open the Notification drawer and touch . From Menu, choose Settings > Wireless & Network > Wi-Fi . Connecting to Wi-Fi Choose the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. If you see , you need to enter a password to connect.
PAGE 228
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi tethering Use your LG-C660 as portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Settings > Wireless & Network > Tethering & Portable Hotspot > Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot NOTE: The LG-C660 supports WEP, WPA/WPA2-PSK and 802.1x EAP security. If your WiFi service provider or network administrator sets encryption for network security, enter the key into the pop-up window. If encryption is not set, this pop-up window is not shown. Obtain the key from your Wi-Fi service provider or network administrator.
PAGE 229
Software update Phone Software update LG Mobile Phone Software update from internet For more information on using this function, please visit the http://update.lgmobile.com or http://www.lg.com/common/ index.jsp → select country and language. This feature allows you to update the firmware of your phone to the newer version conveniently from the internet without the need to visit a service centre. This feature is only available if and when LG makes the newer version of the firmware available for your device.
PAGE 230
Software update Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to 320x240 DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. Notice! Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licences, please visit http:// opensource.lge.
PAGE 231
Accessories These Accessories are available for use with the LG-C660. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel Adapter Data cable Connect your LG-C660 and PC. Battery User Guide Learn more about your LG-C660. Stereo headset NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may void your warranty. • Accessories may vary in different regions.
PAGE 232
Technical data Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C (discharging), +45°C (charging) Min: -10°C Declaration of Conformity Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment Model Name LG-C660 Trade Name LG Applicable Standards Details R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1, EN 301 489-07 V1.3.
PAGE 233
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Corrective Measures USIM error There is no USIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection/ Loosing network Weak Signal outside of GSM network area.
PAGE 234
Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible Corrective Measures Calls not available Dialing error New SIM card inserted Prepaid Charge limit reached New network not authorised. Check for new restrictions. Contact Service Provider or reset limit with PIN 2. Phone cannot be switched on On/Off key pressed long enough Battery is not charged Battery contacts are dirty Press the On/Off key down for at least two seconds. Keep charger attached for a longer time Clean the contacts.
PAGE 235
Message Possible causes Impossible to receive/ send Memory Full SMS & Picture Possible Corrective Measures Delete some existing messages in the phone. Files not open Unsupported file format Check the file format that can be supported SD Card not working FAT 16 file system supported only Check SD card file system via card reader Or format SD card using phone No Sound Vibration or manner mode Check the setting status of sound menu to make sure you are not in vibrate or silent mode.
PAGE 236
PAGE 237
PAGE 238